‫‪A‬‬
‫‪XW-P1‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪MA1112-A Printed in China‬‬
‫‪XWP1-AR-1A‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪XWP1-AR-1A‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:28:14 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 1‬‬
‫● ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻌ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺗ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻄﺮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-1‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:06 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-5 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪AR-35 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‪AR-8 ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻼﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻴﻦ( ‪AR-35 .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪AR-8...................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪AR-9..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪AR-9.............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪AR-10 .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪AR-10 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪AR-10 ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ( ‪AR-11 .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪AR-11 ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪AR-12 .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪AR-14 ...........‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪AR-14 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪AR-14 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪AR-15 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ‪AR-16 ......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪AR-17 ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ‪AR-17 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪AR-18 ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪AR-35 ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪AR-35 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ‪AR-36 ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ‪AR-36 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ‪AR-36 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪AR-37 ......................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪AR-38 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ‪AR-39 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎﹰ‪AR-40 ....................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪AR-40 .......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪AR-41 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪AR-43 .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪AR-44 .....................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪AR-44 ...............................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪AR-45 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪AR-45 ........ .‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-18 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ‪AR-45 ...................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪AR-22 ............................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪AR-47 .....................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ‪AR-20 ........................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪AR-21 ..................‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ( ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪AR-30 ..................‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪AR-32 .............................‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪ PCM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﻏﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ(‪AR-33 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪AR-46 ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪AR-47 ....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪AR-48 ........‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪AR-48 ................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪AR-34 ..............................‬‬
‫‪AR-2‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:06 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪AR-49 .....................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪AR-67 ........................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪AR-51 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪AR-67 ..............‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪AR-49 ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ – ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ‪AR-51 .............................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪AR-52 .........................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ‪AR-52 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪AR-52 ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪AR-53 ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‪AR-53 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪AR-53 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪AR-54 ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ‪AR-54 ...................................................... 1‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪AR-55 .............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪AR-55 .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪AR-55 ...................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ( ‪AR-55 .............‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ – ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪AR-55 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ‪AR-55 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ‪AR-59 .........................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻇﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻟﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪AR-59 ...................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ‪AR-60 .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪AR-60 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ‪AR-60 .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪AR-61 .................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪AR-61 ............................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ SMF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-61 .............‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ‪AR-62 .........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-62 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ‪AR-62 .................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪AR-62 ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺎ ‪AR-63 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪AR-64 ..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪AR-67 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ‪AR-68 .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪AR-69 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ( ‪AR-69 ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪AR-69 .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‪AR-69 ...................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪AR-69 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ‪AR-69 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪AR-69 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AR-69 ............................................MIDI‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ‪MIDI‬؟ ‪AR-69 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪AR-70 ..........................................................MIDI‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪AR-71 .....................‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ‪AR-71 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-72 ..........‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-73 ......................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ‪AR-73 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪AR-74 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-74 ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-75 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-75 ....................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-75 ...........................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-76 ...............‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-77 ..........................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-77 ..............‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-77 ........‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-78 ......................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-78 .................‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-78 ......................‬‬
‫‪AR-3‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:06 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-79 ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-79 ......................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ‪AR-79 .................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪AR-80 ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ‪AR-81 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪AR-81 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪AR-82 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪AR-84 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪AR-86 .........................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪AR-87 ...........................................DSP‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪AR-87 ........................................................ DSP‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪AR-88 ..................................................... DSP‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪AR-91 ...................................‬‬
‫‪MIDI Implementation Chart‬‬
‫‪AR-4‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:07 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 4‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ( ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ )‪ ،‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺬ ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻔﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﻮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ(‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻬﺪ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪ ﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ )‪ (‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ .(‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-35‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ )‪ .(‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-32‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-35‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-52‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﻢ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪AR-67 ،AR-52 ،AR-35‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-5‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:07 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 5‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫‪bn‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪bk .‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ]‪ [VOLUME‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-9‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪-‬ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪AR-69 ،AR-12 ،AR-11‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪ ﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-45‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪AR-67 ،AR-51‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-51‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪AR-51 ،AR-11‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪AR-67 ،AR-40 ،AR-38‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-44‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-12‬‬
‫‪AR-6‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:08 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 6‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪br‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-20‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )–( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-21‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-36‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫‪bs‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [BENDER‬ﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ]‪ [MODULATION‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-35‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-7‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:09 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﹰﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-69‬‬
‫)‪(7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ ،CD‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‬
‫‪AR-8‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:09 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-65‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(7‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ“ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-67‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-22‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ )ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ CD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪MIC VOLUME‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .AR-67‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-22‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪ ،AUX IN‬ﺃﻟﺦ( ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ L/MONO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼ ﹰﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪ VOLUME‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻀﻴﺮ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺬﻋﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﺒﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫‪ ،AC‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ JEITA) AC‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪AD-E95100L :‬‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪DC 9.5V‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ POWER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪POWER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-9‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:09 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫■ ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪POWER‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪POWER‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺩﺍﻓﺌ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻲﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺛﻨﻲ!‬
‫ﻻ ﺇﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ!‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻗﻼﻡ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ DC‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D‬ﻷﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻚ‪-‬ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺴﺮﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ‪ 35‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ* )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺳﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ‬
‫‪.(CASIO CP-16‬‬
‫* ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺼﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Battery Low‬ﻭﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪.AC‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-69‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪ -‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ POWER‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-10‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:10 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 10‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻟﻸﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ POWER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫■ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﻮ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺼﺖ ﻟﻠﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TONE‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪PCM 8‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻻﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-20‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪AR-11‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:11 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 11‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺮ￯ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪SOLO SYNTH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ“‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ 10‬ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،9‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻧﻐﻤﻠﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺒﺮﺓ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪VOLUME‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪EDIT‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-21‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﺤﻦ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺄﺧﺬ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪EDIT‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HEX LAYER‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.0-0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ*(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ”ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎﻅ ”ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ“ ﻭ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ .(+‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‬
‫‪ :P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫‪ :U‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ(‬
‫‪AR-12‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 2:30:38 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_04_ar_C03.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻓﻌﻠﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ )‪ (U‬ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻦ )‪ (I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-91‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩﻱ‬
‫‪JKL‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ WRITE‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪WXYZ‬‬
‫‪TUV‬‬
‫‪PQRS‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ )ﺟﺰﺀ ‪(2‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪GHI‬‬
‫‪DEF‬‬
‫‪ABC‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ )ﺟﺰﺀ ‪(1‬‬
‫‪MNO‬‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”?‪) “Replace‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ؟( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪*.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪*.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪YES‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ‪.YES‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪NO‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫‪ :U‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ :0-0‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪ ،0‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪0‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﻳﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪PRESET/USER‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ )ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪AR-13‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:11 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 13‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺗﻘﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺘﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻮﻻﺀ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺖ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“‬
‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-18‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻔﻌﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﹰﺍ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺒﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺋﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻧﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ KEY PLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭ“(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺬﻫﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺮ￯ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ KEY PLAY‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺷﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﻐﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-46‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-40‬‬
‫‪AR-14‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:12 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 14‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﺷﺮﺣﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQ‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (16‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ‪ 11‬ﻭ ‪ 14‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (16‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺛﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (e‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪.(+‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PART‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫‪.AR-49‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ ،2-3‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-49‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ )ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪PATTERN‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .8‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪3‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫‪AR-15‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:12 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 15‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺕ ﻛﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ”ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ“‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PERFORM‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪PCM PAINO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪-‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (e‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ PART‬‬
‫)–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (e‬ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪   ‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-18‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PART‬‬
‫)‪ (e‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .2‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪.4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮ￯ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ) ! ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪WRITE‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-16‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:13 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 16‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  SETTING‬ﻭ ‪ WRITE‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ”‪“Aura Lee‬‬
‫• ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ ) ! ( ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ ) * ( ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ”‪ ،“Aura Lee‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ 2-1‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.2-1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪-‬ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻚ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ”‪ ،“Aura Lee‬ﺑﻨﻚ ‪ 3‬ﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-62‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-72‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-71‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺘﻚ‬
‫ﻭﻻﺗﻨﺪﻓﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﹰﺍ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻔﻬﻢ ﻓﻬﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺫﻫﺎﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎ ﹰﻻ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻴﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻚ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ!‬
‫‪AR-17‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:13 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 17‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪bm bn bo‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪br‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-11‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪7‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ،1‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻚ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-62‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-69‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-40‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ MIC IN, INST IN‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-67‬‬
‫* ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻻﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻬﻢ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﻮﺍ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻭﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ”ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ“ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ“‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ‪ ،2‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪) MIDI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR–64‬‬
‫‪AR-18‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:13 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 18‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(4‬‬
‫)‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(3‬‬
‫)‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(2‬‬
‫)‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(1‬‬
‫‪AR-19‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:14 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 19‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TONE‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ SOLO SYNTH‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ VARIOUS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PRESET/USER‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ NUM/BANK‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ‪‬‬
‫•‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪ . NUM/BANK‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ‪‬‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻔﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫■ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺳﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪PCM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻀﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻀﺒﺎﻥ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺘﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫‪420‬‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-20‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:14 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 20‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺳﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ ) ! ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺗﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-22‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-34‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ”‪) “Volume‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪055‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  ENTER‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-71‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ WRITE‬‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫‪AR-21‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:14 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 21‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ،(6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﻀﺎﺀ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫)‪ (9‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪LFO2‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪OSC2‬‬
‫)‪ (8‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪LFO1‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪OSC1‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫‪LFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ‪OSC‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(7‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪PCM OSC2‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪PCM OSC1‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫‪PCM OSC‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(9‬‬
‫)‪ (10‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫‪ HOLD‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺡ ﺻﺎﺧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫‪MIC IN‬‬
‫‪INST IN‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫*‪EG‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫* ‪) Envelope Generator‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪AR-22‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:15 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 22‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪OSC1‬‬
‫”‪ “OSC‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ”‪) “oscillator‬ﺍﻟﻤﺬﺑﺬﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻴﻦ ‪ OSC‬ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺨﻠﻘﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ‪ :OSC‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ EG‬ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻔﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪OSC2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪1‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪PCM OSC1‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪PCM OSC2‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫)‪ (8‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪LFO1‬‬
‫)‪ (9‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ‪LFO2‬‬
‫)‪ (10‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪) PCM‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪ .(PCM‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ‪ OSC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪) “(6‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-24‬‬
‫ﺑﺪ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ MIC IN‬ﻭ ‪.INST IN‬‬
‫ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻟﺪ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻮﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (6‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ ‪) DSP‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫”‪ “LFO‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ”‪) “low-frequency oscillator‬ﻣﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ‪ LFO‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺘﻀﻤﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺡ ﺻﺎﺧﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ .MIDI‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (9‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﺗﺤﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ( ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ )ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ( ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺎ ”ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-23‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:15 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 23‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(6‬‬
‫•‬
‫( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-35‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ )‪ (‬ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ )‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “OSC Block >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫‪ :Syn1‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ‪OSC1‬‬
‫‪ :Syn2‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ‪OSC2‬‬
‫‪PCM OSC1 :PCM1‬‬
‫‪PCM OSC2 :PCM2‬‬
‫‪ :Ext‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ :Noise‬ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫• )‪ (V‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪) (10‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-29‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪OSC On Off‬‬
‫‪) Oscillator >Ent‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ .(OSC On/Off) OSC‬ﺃﻥ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﺑﺬﺏ )‪ .(oscillator‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﺕ ‪،OSC‬‬
‫‪ ،PCM OSC‬ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-21‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. EDIT‬‬
‫‪Synth Wave‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (1‬ﻭ )‪ (2‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪PCM Wave‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (3‬ﻭ )‪ (4‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ )‪ ،(SYNTH WAVE‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ .(PCM WAVE) PCM‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ‪ OSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.PCM OSC‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ”‪ “L‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “B‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ”‪ ،“B‬ﻻﺷﻲﺀ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ C5‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﹰﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(5‬‬
‫)‪Pitch (V‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )‪ .(pitch‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ‪ ±2‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ –256‬ﻳﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ 255‬ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪Detune (V‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )‪ (detune‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –256‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+255‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –256‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+255‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key follow‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪C4‬‬
‫‪Key Follow = 127‬‬
‫‪Key Follow = 64‬‬
‫)‪KeyFollow (V‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪D4‬‬
‫‪C#4‬‬
‫‪Key Follow = 0‬‬
‫‪Key Follow‬‬
‫‪Key Follow = -127‬‬
‫‪C4‬‬
‫‪Bb4‬‬
‫‪C#4‬‬
‫‪C4‬‬
‫‪Key Follow Base‬‬
‫)‪KeyFolBase (V‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key follow base‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻹﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫)‪Env.Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ )‪ .(envelope depth‬ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪AR-24‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:16 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 24‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )‪ .(envelope‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ( ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،PCM OSC ،OSC‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯(‪.‬‬
‫‪Level‬‬
‫‪AL‬‬
‫‪RL1‬‬
‫‪SL‬‬
‫‪Envelope >Ent‬‬
‫‪IL‬‬
‫‪RL2‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪RT2‬‬
‫‪RT1‬‬
‫‪ : RT1‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ : RL1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ : RT2‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬
‫‪ : RL2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬
‫‪DT‬‬
‫‪: IL‬‬
‫‪: AT‬‬
‫‪: AL‬‬
‫‪: DT‬‬
‫‪: SL‬‬
‫‪AT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻷﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‬
‫)‪Init.Level (V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )‪ .(initial level‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪Atk.Time (V‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ )‪ .(attack time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪Atk.Level (V‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ )‪ .(attack level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪Dec.Time (V‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ )‪ .(decay time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪Sus.Level (V‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ )‪ .(sustain level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﻪ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪Rel.Time1 (V‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ .(release time 1) 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪Rel.Level1 (V‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ .(release level 1) 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪Rel.Time2 (V‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ .(release time 2) 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪Rel.Level2 (V‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ .(release level 2) 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Clk.Trig‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(clock trigger‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪1/4U‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4U‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪،2/3 ،1/2 ،1/3 ،1/4 ،Off‬‬
‫‪،1/4U ،4 ،3 ،2 ،3/2 ،1‬‬
‫‪،1U ،2/3U ،1/2U ،1/3U‬‬
‫‪4U ،3U ،2U ،3/2U‬‬
‫‪Ext.Trig‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )‪ .(external trigger‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫)‪LFO1 Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(LFO1 depth) LFO1‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(8‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪LFO2 Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(LFO2 depth) LFO2‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(9‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪PulseWidth‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (1‬ﻭ )‪ (2‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(V‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻀﺔ )‪ .(pulse width‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(PWM LFO1 depth) PWM LFO1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.LFO1‬‬
‫‪PWM‬‬
‫‪PWM LFO1 Depth‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (1‬ﻭ )‪ (2‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(V‬‬
‫‪PWM LFO2 Depth‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (1‬ﻭ )‪ (2‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(V‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(PWM LFO2 depth) PWM LFO2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.LFO2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪AR-25‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:16 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 25‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪) Sync OSC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (2‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ )‪ .(Sync OSC‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (2‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ ،(1‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺤﻮﺍ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪) OriginalKey‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )‪ .(original key‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪) MicInstLvl‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(V‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ‪ .(Mic/inst level) Mic/inst‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(5‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪) TrigThresh‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(V‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ )‪ .(trigger threshold‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﻡ ﻻ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-25‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪) TrigRelease‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(V‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ )‪ .(trigger release time‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-25‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪) P.ShiftMode‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )‪ .(pitch shifter mode‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻐﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 ،2 ،1 ،Off‬‬
‫‪) P.ShiftMix‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (5‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺧﻼﻁ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )‪ .(pitch shifter mix‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :0‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ :7‬ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ :15‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪15‬‬
‫‪) Noise Type‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (6‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ )‪ .(noise type‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ .(6‬ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻜﺴﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Filter >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )‪ .(filter‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Gain‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ )‪ .(gain‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “Flat‬ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪Cutoff (V‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )‪ .(cuttoff frequency‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪،–6dB ،–12dB ،–18dB‬‬
‫‪Flat ،–3dB‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪15‬‬
‫)‪TouchSense (V‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪ .(touch sense‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪KeyFollow (V‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key follow‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫)‪KeyFolBase (V‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key follow base‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫)‪Env.Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ )‪ .(envelope depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Envelope >Ent‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 127‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪(2‬‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )‪ .(envelope‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ“ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪LFO1 Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(LFO1 depth) LFO1‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(8‬‬
‫)‪LFO2 Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(LFO2 depth) LFO2‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(9‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ )‪ .(Amp‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Amp >Ent‬‬
‫)‪Volume (V‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ .(volume‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪TouchSense (V‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪ .(touch sense‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪KeyFollow (V‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key follow‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫)‪KeyFolBase (V‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key follow base‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪AR-26‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:17 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 26‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪Envelope >Ent‬‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )‪ .(envelope‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ“‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،127‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 127‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪(2‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪LFO1 Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(LFO1 depth) LFO1‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(8‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪LFO2 Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(LFO2 depth) LFO2‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(9‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Legato‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﻖ )‪ .(Legato‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Portamento‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ )‪ .(Portamento‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫)‪PortaTime (V‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ )‪ .(Portamento Time‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ :(7‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-21‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “Total Filter >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫• )‪ (V‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪) (10‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-29‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪FilterType‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )‪ .(filter type‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :LPF‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :BPF‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :HPF‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪Cutoff (V‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )‪ .(cutoff frequency‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪Resonance (V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ )‪ .(resonance‬ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪TouchSense (V‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪ .(touch sense‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪KeyFollow (V‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key follow‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫)‪KeyFolBase (V‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key follow base‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪Env.Retrig‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ )‪ .(envelope generator retrigger‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫)‪Env.Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ )‪ .(envelope depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Envelope >Ent‬‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ )‪ .(envelope‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ“‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 127‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪(2‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪LFO1 Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(LFO1 depth) LFO1‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(8‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫)‪LFO2 Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .(LFO2 depth) LFO2‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪.(9‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪AR-27‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:18 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 27‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ LFO1 :(8‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ :(9‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪LFO2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “LFO >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫• )‪ (V‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪) (10‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-29‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪ .(wave type‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻞ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪Sin‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺟﻴﺒﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Puls 1:3‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪(1:3‬‬
‫‪Tri‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Puls 2:2‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪(2:2‬‬
‫‪Saw up‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺎﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫‪Puls 3:1‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪(3:1‬‬
‫‪Saw down‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺎﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫‪Random‬‬
‫)ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪WaveType‬‬
‫‪Sync‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )‪ .(sync‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ‪ LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Off‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ :Tempo‬ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) LFO1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻊ ‪ LFO2‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :(.‬ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ‪.LFO1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪Rate (V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ )‪ .(rate‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) LFO‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )‪ (sync‬ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Clk.Sync‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(clock sync‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .LFO‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/4U‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4U‬ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻫﻮ ”‪.“Tempo‬‬
‫‪،3/2 ،1 ،2/3 ،1/2 ،1/3 ،1/4‬‬
‫‪،1/2U ،1/3U ،1/4U ،4 ،3 ،2‬‬
‫‪،3U ،2U ،3/2U ،1U ،2/3U‬‬
‫‪4U‬‬
‫)‪Depth (V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ )‪ .(depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪Delay (V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )‪ .(delay‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪Rise (V‬‬
‫ﺻﻌﻮﺩ )‪ .(rise‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫)‪Mod.Depth (V‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ )‪ .(modulation depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪AR-28‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:18 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 28‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ :(10‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ( ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “VirtualCtrl >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،8‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ‪‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ PART‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪Source‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(8/16‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ )‪ .(source‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Off‬ﻻﺷﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ CC00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :CC97‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪*MIDI‬‬
‫‪ :NoteOnKeyNum‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪ MIDI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ :NoteOnVel‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪ MIDI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ :Ch.Pressure‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫‪ :Bend Up‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ‪ BENDER‬‬
‫‪ :Bend Down‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ‪ BENDER‬‬
‫‪ :Modulation‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ MODULATION‬‬
‫‪) LFO1 :LFO1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪((8‬‬
‫‪) LFO2 :LFO2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪((9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ (http://world.casio.com/) MIDI‬ﻭﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪Depth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ )‪ .(depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Dest‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )‪ .(destination‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Off‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(9‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ AR-24‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ (AR-28‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ”ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ“ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ”)‪ “(V‬ﺑﻌﺪﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪) DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-88‬‬
‫■ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻻﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪DSP On/Off‬‬
‫)ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ .(DSP on/off) DSP‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  ENTER‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪) DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-39‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪DSP Edit >Ent‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ .(DSP Edit) DSP‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-37‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  ENTER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪.DSP‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ .(volume‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Rev.Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-37‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Cho.Send‬‬
‫)ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-37‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪AR-29‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:20 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 29‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ( ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ ،(6‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ) ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ) ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-35‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪(6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “Layer Edit >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-21‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪EDIT‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ PART‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪LayerOn/Off‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ )‪ .(layer on/off‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪PCM Wave‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ .(PCM wave) PCM‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ .(volume‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )‪ .(pan‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪ 0 .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪CoarseTune‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺧﺸﻦ )‪ .(coarse tune‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+24‬‬
‫‪FineTune‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ )‪ .(fine tune‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ –256‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ +255‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –256‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+255‬‬
‫‪Cutoff‬‬
‫‪TouchSense‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )‪ .(cutoff frequency‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪ .(touch sense‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Atk.Time‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ )‪ .(attack time‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Dec.Time‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ )‪ .(decay time‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Sus.Level‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ )‪ .(sustain level‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Rel.Time‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )‪ .(release time‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Rev.Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-37‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Cho.Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-37‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪KeyRangeLow‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪ .(key range low‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪KeyRangeHi‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ .(key range high‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪VelRangeLow‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪ .(velocity range low‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪VelRangeHi‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ .(velocity range high‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Pitch Lock‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ‪ ،4 ،2‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )‪ .(pitch lock‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ ،2‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ ،4‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪.6‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪AR-30‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:20 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 30‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪(6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )‪ .(detune‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ )‪ (31‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺳﻨﺖ )ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪.6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Detune = 31‬‬
‫‪+50cent‬‬
‫‪Detune‬‬
‫‪Layer4 Layer5 Layer6‬‬
‫‪Detune = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪31‬‬
‫‪Layer1 Layer2 Layer3‬‬
‫‪−50cent‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ‪ .(pitch LFO) LFO‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ LFO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Pitch LFO >Ent‬‬
‫‪WaveType‬‬
‫‪Amp LFO >Ent‬‬
‫‪،SawUp ،Tri ،Sin‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪ .(wave type‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻞ ‪ .LFO‬ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ”ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪،Puls1:3 ،SawDown‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ LFO1 :(8‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ :(9‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪) “LFO2‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-28‬‬
‫‪Puls3:1 ،Puls2:2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Rate‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ )‪ .(rate‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) LFO‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Depth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ )‪ .(depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Delay‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )‪ .(delay‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Rise‬‬
‫ﺻﻌﻮﺩ )‪ .(rise‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ LFO‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Mod.Depth‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ )‪ .(modulation depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪After Depth‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ )‪ .(after depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ LFO‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ‪ .(amp LFO) LFO‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ LFO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ”)‪ ،“LFO (Pitch LFO‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺧﺮ￯“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-29‬‬
‫‪AR-31‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:21 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 31‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻖ ) (‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ) ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-35‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫'‪Ft16‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(16 feet‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-16‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫'‪Ft5 1/3‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 1/3‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(5 and 1/3 feet‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-5 1/3‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫'‪Ft8‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(8 feet‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-8‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫'‪Ft4‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(4 feet‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-4‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫'‪Ft2 2/3‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 2/3‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(2 and 2/3 feet‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-2 2/3‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫'‪Ft2‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(2 feet‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-2‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫'‪Ft1 3/5‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 3/5‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(1 and 3/5 feet‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-1 3/5‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫'‪Ft1 1/3‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 1/3‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(1 and 1/3 feet‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-1 1/3‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫'‪Ft1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ .(1 foot‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪-1‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫‪Perc.2nd‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (2nd overtone percussion‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Perc.3rd‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ )‪ (3nd overtone percussion‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Perc.Decay‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ )‪ .(percussion decay time‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Off Click‬‬
‫ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key off click‬ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Type‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪ .(wave type‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺟﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Vin ،Sin‬‬
‫ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ .(key on click‬ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪On Click‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Vib.Rate‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪ .(vibrato rate‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Vib.Depth‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪ .(vibrato depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .(button assign‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪) DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١*(AR-88‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪. ROTARY SLOW/FAST‬‬
‫‪ ،Off‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*8‬‬
‫‪Rot.Setting >Ent‬‬
‫‪Button Assign‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ .(rotary setting‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪. ROTARY SLOW/FAST‬‬
‫‪On Value‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ .(on value‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﻀﻲﺀ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Off Value‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ .(off value‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-88‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻣﺪ￯ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. ROTARY SLOW/FAST‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺧﺮ￯“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-29‬‬
‫‪AR-32‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:22 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 32‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪ PCM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﻏﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪ PCM‬ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ )‪ .(attack time‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Rls.Time‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )‪ .(release time‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻀﻤﺤﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Cutoff‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )‪ .(cutoff frequency‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Vib.Type‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ )‪ .(vibrato type‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Sin‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺟﻴﺒﻴﺔ(‪) Tri ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ(‪) Saw ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﻨﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪) Sqr ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Sqr ،Saw ،Tri ،Sin‬‬
‫‪Vib.Depth‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ )‪ .(vibrato depth‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Vib.Rate‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ )‪ .(vibrato rate‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Vib.Delay‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ )‪ .(vibrato delay‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Oct.Shift‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )‪ .(octave shift‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2‬‬
‫‪Atk.Time‬‬
‫‪TouchSense‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪ .(touch sense‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺧﺮ￯“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-29‬‬
‫‪AR-33‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:22 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 33‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-21‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )‪ .(instrument edit‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-21‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. EDIT‬‬
‫‪Inst Edit >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(G9‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )‪ .(instrument select‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Inst Number‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Inst Select >Ent‬‬
‫‪127 Velocity‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫]‪[3‬‬
‫]‪[2‬‬
‫]‪[1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ‪1‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫]‪[3‬‬
‫]‪[2‬‬
‫]‪[1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Velocity Range Hi‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫‪Inst Number‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )‪ .(instrument number‬ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪VelRangeHi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ )‪ .(velocity range high‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ .(volume‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )‪ .(pan‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Rev.Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪NoteOffMode‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )‪ .(note off mode‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪ .(assign group‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ )ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫‪-‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،Off‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪15‬‬
‫‪Pitch LFO >Ent‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ‪ .(pitch LFO) LFO‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ LFO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ”)‪ “LFO (Pitch LFO‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪) “(6‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-31‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Amp LFO >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ‪ .(amp LFO) LFO‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ LFO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ”)‪ “LFO (Amp LFO‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪) “(6‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-31‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Assign Grp‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-29‬‬
‫‪AR-34‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:23 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 34‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-40‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-44‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-8‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .Pedal Controller >Ent :‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-65‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻼﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺑﺴﻼﻟﺴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻴﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ BENDER‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ MODULATION‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻴﻦ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻭﻳﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ‪BENDER‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪) BendRngUp ،BendRngDwn :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR–64‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-30‬‬
‫‪ : K1‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-30‬‬
‫‪ : K2‬ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 6‬ﻛﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-31‬‬
‫‪ : K3‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-30‬‬
‫‪ : K4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-30‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-32‬‬
‫‪ : K1‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ : K2‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ : K3‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺿﻤﺤﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫‪ : K4‬ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪) PCM‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-33‬‬
‫‪ : K1‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪ : K2‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ‬
‫‪ : K3‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ : K4‬ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪) PCM‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-34‬‬
‫‪ : K1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )> ‪(Drum Inst‬‬
‫‪ : K2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )> ‪(Drum Inst‬‬
‫‪ : K3‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )> ‪(Drum Inst‬‬
‫‪ : K4‬ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ ‪ASSIGNABLE KNOBS‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-22‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪:(AR-65‬‬
‫‪ Controller >Ent‬ﻣﻦ ‪ K1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪K4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-24‬‬
‫‪ : K1‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪) ((7‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-27‬‬
‫‪ : K2‬ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪) ((7‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-27‬‬
‫‪ : K3‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(Amp >Envelope > (6‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-27‬‬
‫‪ : K4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪) 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(Amp >Envelope > (6‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-27‬‬
‫‪AR-35‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:24 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 35‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ )ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪HOLD‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-40‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-44‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻖ ) ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ‪ :‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(6‬‬
‫)‪ ،Amp >Volume‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-26‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6‬‬
‫)‪ ،Volume‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-30‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ‪ :‬ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻗﻀﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ '‪ Ft16‬ﺇﻟﻰ '‪ ،Ft1‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-32‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ (‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ )‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ )‪ (‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ HOLD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺃ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪HOLD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫‪ ،PARAM A‬ﻭ ‪ PARAM B‬ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-88‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-29‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(6‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6‬‬
‫‪ TRANSPOSE‬ﻭ ‪ (–, +) OCTAVE‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻴﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-69‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪TRANSPOSE‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪. (+‬‬
‫‪OCTAVE‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ –12‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +12‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﻡ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫‪ROTARY SLOW/FAST‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ*‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲﺀ )‪ ،SLOW‬ﻳﻨﻄﻔﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪ ،FAST‬ﹾ‬
‫‪ : PERCUSSION SECOND‬ﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪) (2nd overtone percussion‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-32‬‬
‫‪PERCUSSION THIRD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬
‫)‪) (3rd overtone percussion‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-32‬‬
‫* ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻗﻀﻴﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-51‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻄﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫)‪،HEX LAYER‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﻟﺦ( ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-49‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-67‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-36‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:24 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 36‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪) (+‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪OCTAVE‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪TRANSPOSE‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ –3‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +3‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪ DSP (3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫)‪ DSP (4‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﺬﻫﺐ ﺧﻼﻝ )‪،(3) ،(2‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ )‪ .(4‬ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻭ ‪ “DSP‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ DSP (3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 46‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ *.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”)‪(7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ“ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .AR-22‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺖ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺎ‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﺰﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ،1‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪) DSP‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ DSP‬ﺧﺎﺹ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DSP‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ”‪“DSP‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻷﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-67‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫■ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻭ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ )ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ DSP ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ DSP ،‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺋﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ،1‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪“DSP/‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ،1‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪“DSP/‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫• ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪ DSP (3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪ DSP (4‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-29‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-68‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ DSP (4‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫‪AR-37‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:25 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 37‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EFFECT‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ‪‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪Rev Type‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )‪ .(reverb type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Type2 ،Type1‬‬
‫‪Rev Level‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )‪ .(reverb level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Rev Time‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )‪ .(release time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Cho Level‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ )‪ .(chorus level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Cho Rate‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ )‪ .(chorus rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻤﻮﺝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪ChoSendRev‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )‪ .(chorus send level to reverb‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cho/DSP‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ .(Chorus/DSP) DSP/‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺃﻭ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )”ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻭ‬
‫‪ ،“DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-37‬‬
‫‪DSP Select >Ent‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.1‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪DSP ،Cho‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟـ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ton‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “ton‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Preset‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0-0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9-9‬‬
‫• ‪ Param A‬ﻭ ‪) Param B‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-88‬ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪ :User‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0-0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9-9‬‬
‫‪ K1 ‬ﻭ ‪.K2‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  EDIT‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪) DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-39‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (5‬ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-37‬‬
‫‪Master EQ >Ent‬‬
‫‪EQ Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ EQ‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Low Freq‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪ .(low frequency band‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 200‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 400 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 800‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪Low Gain‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪ .(low gain‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+12‬‬
‫‪Mid1 Freq‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ .(mid 1 frequency band) 1‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1.0‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 5.0‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪Mid1 Gain‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .(mid1 gain) 1‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+12‬‬
‫‪Mid2 Freq‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ .(mid 2 frequency band) 2‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1.0‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 5.0‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪Mid2 Gain‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .(mid2 gain) 2‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+12‬‬
‫‪High Freq‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ .(high frequency band‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6.0‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 8.0 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 10.0‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪High Gain‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+12‬‬
‫‪AR-38‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:26 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 38‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟـ ‪ DSP‬ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 53‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ DSP .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ 0-0‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 0-1‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ :DSP‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ ،DSP‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “DSP‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-87‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) DSP Edit >Ent‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-29‬ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-38‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪EDIT‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ :DSP‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-21‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-88‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ ،DSP‬ﺃﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪WRITE‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-38‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ‪ .DSP‬ﺃﺣﻔﻆ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪WRITE‬‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫‪AR-39‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:27 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 39‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺘﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ )‪ : (HOLD‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱﺀ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )‪ : (SYNC‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ،(HOLD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪STEP +‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ‪ HOLD‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : OFF‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ON‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )‪ ،(SYNC‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ – ‪STEP‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : OFF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ON‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : S/S‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ HOLD‬ﻭ ‪ SYNC‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ،HOLD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ HOLD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪  EDIT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ‪ ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-40‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:27 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 40‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺧﻄﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : TYPE‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ )‪ (L1‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ )‪ .(U1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ P2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(P5‬‬
‫‪ : NOTE‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : VELO‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ ،NOTE ،TYPE‬ﻭ ‪.VELO‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ TYPE‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ TYPE‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ”‪ (“MASTER‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪1-8/9-16‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 8‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ( ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ 9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 16‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ TYPE‬ﻫﻮ ‪ TIE‬ﻭ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‪” ،‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-52‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ ،“Step Edit‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Step Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪AR-41‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:28 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 41‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Step Edit >Ent‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ‬
‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪.(L1‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺐ )‪) (L‬ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ‪ L1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(L6‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪ L1‬ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ L1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L8‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ‬
‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪.(U1‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺐ )‪) (U‬ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ U1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪U8‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ‪ U1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(U6‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪ U1‬ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪TYPE‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ )‪ (P‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ P2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪P5‬‬
‫‪NOTE‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+24‬‬
‫‪VELO‬‬
‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ ،NOTE ،TYPE‬ﻭ ‪ VELO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EXIT‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ ،“Parameter‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Parameter >Ent‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫‪Max Step‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Step Size‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪،6 ،2‬‬
‫‪NoteLngth‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪%100) .‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ %50 ،‬ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪100%‬‬
‫‪Groove‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ %50) .‬ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪90%‬‬
‫‪Grv.Type‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ‪.%50‬‬
‫‪Velocity‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ KeyOn‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Normal‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Short‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،KeyOn‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Hold Pedal‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off ،On‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪،7 ،‬‬
‫‪8،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪WRITE‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-71‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫‪AR-42‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 3:53:41 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_06_ar_C05.indd 42‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ‪) Step Edit‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-42‬ﻭﺧﻠﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ARPEGGIO‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ ،“Clear Step‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”?‪ “Clear‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ YES‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”!‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-43‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:30 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 43‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪bn‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻔﺘﻖ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻫﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ )ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ‬
‫• ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP +‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ – ‪ STEP‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : OFF‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ : ON‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ : OFF‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ON‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ‪ PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪KEY PLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪ PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫‪AR-44‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:30 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 44‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ TEMPO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪TEMPO‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ – ‪)  TEMPO‬ﺃﺑﻄﺄ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TEMPO +‬‬
‫)ﺃﺳﺮﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ KEY PLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪  EDIT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ‪ KEY PLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ KEY PLAY‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ TEMPO –, +‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.255‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻻﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ”‪ “Phrase Key Range Lo‬ﻭ‬
‫”‪ “Phrase Key Range Hi‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-66‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻘﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TAP‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪) “TEMPO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-45‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-45‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:31 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 45‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 1,600‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪REC‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪) OVDB‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“Rec Mode‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) NEW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Guide‬‬
‫‪Precount‬‬
‫‪Beat‬‬
‫• ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺁﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪(End Qntz‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Off‬ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : 1M‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : 2‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪-‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 1M‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 2/4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،8/4‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 2/8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16/8‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪REC‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ‪ REC‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”‪) “!TEMP‬ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ( ﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪REC‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯( )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-47‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )‪(Note Qntz‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪ ‪،Off‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1:1‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 2:2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ‪ REC‬‬
‫‪ : 6‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺷﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪ .‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪) .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻻﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤ ﹰﺎ ﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪،7 ،‬‬
‫‪،6‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪WRITE‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-48‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-71‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫‪AR-46‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:31 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 46‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-45‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ )ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ KEY PLAY‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻔﻈﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ WRITE‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-48‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.AR-71‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﺔﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ‪REC‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪) NEW‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﻛﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“Rec Mode‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) OVDB‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪OriginalKey‬‬
‫‪Key Shift‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ –‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –127‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪+127‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪) .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪(.000‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )‪) (Note Qntz‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-46‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪REC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ‪REC‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭ ‪PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ )!( ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-47‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:32 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 47‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC‬‬
‫‪. PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ‪. REC‬‬
‫ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻛﺤﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪REC‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪WRITE‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪REC‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Can't UNDO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “not enough space‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫”‪ ،“Press Enter‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-71‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫!‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪ : ! TEMP‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ“ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ )!( ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ )ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ“ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-48‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:37 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 48‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻛﺤﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ )‪ (PART‬ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،5‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ( ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺇﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-55‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ )‪ (Beat Info‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ 16‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-67‬‬
‫‪AR-49‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:38 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 49‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-67‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-53‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-52‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪8ch‬‬
‫‪9ch‬‬
‫‪10ch‬‬
‫‪11ch‬‬
‫‪12ch‬‬
‫‪13ch‬‬
‫‪14ch‬‬
‫‪15ch‬‬
‫‪16ch‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻟﻮ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻟﻮ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫*ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪3‬‬
‫*ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫* ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫‪AR-50‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:38 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 50‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺑﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ )ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪CHAIN‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪CHAIN‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،C2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ‪ D2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.B2‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-55‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ START/STOP‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ START/STOP‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. KEY SHIFT‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ – ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ )ﻣﺸﻴﺮ ﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪CHAIN‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪CHAIN‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﻔﺖ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫‪START/STOP‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-40‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-45‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-51‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (e‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.8‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PATTERN‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻴﺮ ﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫‪START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (e‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-51‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:39 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 51‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔﺍﻻﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ NOTE‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫■ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ OFF‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫)ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ .16‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8/16‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ( ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.16‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‪” ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-55‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪1-8/9-16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.16‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪1-8/9-16‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ 9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪1-8/9-16‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 16‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪AR-52‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:39 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 52‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫■ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪FUNC A/B‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪(NOTE) L :‬‬
‫‪FUNC A/B‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪(VELOCITY) M :‬‬
‫‪FUNC A/B‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ )‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (B‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪FUNC A/B‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “TYPE‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪NO‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ YES‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﺎ ‪ L‬ﺃﻭ ‪.M‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8/16‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪NOTE‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪VELO‬‬
‫‪ : NOTE & VELO‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ ،(w‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (8‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PATTERN‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (8‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ )‪ (8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻉ )‪.(1‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ‪MASTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻄﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻴﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺪﻭﺩ( ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-53‬ﻭ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ“‬
‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-59‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ‪ A‬ﻻﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  FUNC A/B‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ SLIDER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪ NO‬ﻭ ‪ YES‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  FUNC A/B‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.SLIDER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪  MENU‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“M.Slider‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ )‪ (I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪AR-53‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:41 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 53‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ ،“Step Edit‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ] [ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Part‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫”‪ “Assign‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Nop‬‬
‫‪S. Data‬‬
‫‪S. Size‬‬
‫‪NoteLn‬‬
‫‪Groove‬‬
‫‪Octave‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(16‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،8‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ –1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(1‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-56‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.AR-59‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻟﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ −‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪.14‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  MENU‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ )‪.(I‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪،“Setting‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Solo1 Ch‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ : 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ : 14‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪14‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-54‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:41 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 54‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ‪ “1‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-54‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Pattern Change Timing‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  STEP SEQUENCER‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪EDIT‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MIXER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(16‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻮﻟﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) Track On/Off‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-56‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.AR-67‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ : Wait‬ﺃﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Real‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻮﺭ ﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-40‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ – ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQ‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. EDIT‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-67‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-55‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:42 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 55‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪3‬‬
‫‪Trk On/Off >Ent‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ )‪(track on/off‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  EDIT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.Trk On/Off >Ent‬‬
‫‪Pattern‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫‪Part‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Drm‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Bass ،5‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Sol1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،Chrd ،2‬‬
‫‪ Ctl‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬
‫‪Track‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .4‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺗﺘﻴﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-50‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪-‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Step Edit >Ent‬‬
‫‪ Drm‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،5‬‬
‫‪،Bass‬‬
‫‪ Sol1‬ﻭ ‪2‬‬
‫‪VELO ،NOTE‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ ،(OFF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ،(NOTE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ )‪ (TIE‬ﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )‪ (NOTE‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )‪ .(VELOCITY‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪Chrd‬‬
‫‪VELO ،NOTE‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ ،(OFF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ،(NOTE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ )‪ (TIE‬ﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )‪ (NOTE‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )‪ .(VELOCITY‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪) ،Off‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :NOTE‬ﻣﻦ –‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪) ،G9‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :VELO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪Tie ،127‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) ،Off‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :NOTE‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫–‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ،G9‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :VELO‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Tie ،127‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ .(Ctl‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ctl‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ :NOP‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻧﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PHRASE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪BEND‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+127‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ CC1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪97‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪.MIDI‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Pan ،127‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ K1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪TEMPO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪255‬‬
‫‪PHRASE‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪4‬‬
‫)‪ (Ctl4‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Nop‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ :Stop ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‪،‬‬
‫‪ : Start‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :+24‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ(‬
‫‪AR-56‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:45 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 56‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪3‬‬
‫‪Track Param >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Max Step‬‬
‫‪Beat Info‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪Step Size‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪،6 ،2‬‬
‫‪NoteLngth‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪%100 .‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ‪ %50‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪100%‬‬
‫‪Groove‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ–ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ‪ %50‬ﺣﺘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪90%‬‬
‫‪Grv.Type‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ %50‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻸﺧﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Norml‬ﻳﺠﺮ￯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Short‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺪﻭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ctrl.Ch‬‬
‫)ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ،1‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪Smooth‬‬
‫)ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off ،On‬‬
‫‪Phrase No.‬‬
‫)ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ 4‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ P00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،99‬ﻣﻦ ‪ U00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99‬‬
‫‪Key Shift >Ent‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .3‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ 4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺆﺗﻴﺒﻪ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪،7 ،‬‬
‫‪8،‬‬
‫‪Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪BreakPoint‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ C‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪B‬‬
‫‪Realtime‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :On‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ : Off‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 2/4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،8/4‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 2/8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16/8‬‬
‫‪AR-57‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:46 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 57‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪3‬‬
‫‪Copy >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ )‪ (TMP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪Track‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Dr1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪S2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Dr1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪S2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Ctrl1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Ctrl1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪3‬‬
‫‪Ctrl4‬‬
‫‪Ctrl4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ )‪ (TMP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Pattern‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪Note Shift >Ent‬‬
‫‪Shift‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+24‬‬
‫‪Ptn‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪08‬‬
‫‪Part‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Dr1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Sl1 ،Bas ،5‬ﻭ ‪Chd ،2‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Clear >Ent‬‬
‫‪Track‬‬
‫‪Part ،Pattern‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Pattern‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Pattern‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪ :Part‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Drm1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Sol1 ،Bass ،5‬ﻭ ‪،2‬‬
‫‪ ،Chrd‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Ctl1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬
‫‪AR-58‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:47 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 58‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪PATTERN‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PART‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪STEP‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،Step Edit‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،B‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ‪ :Copy‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻟﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC A/B‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC A/B‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-51‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻟﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻇﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻟﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ STEP SEQUENCER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  FUNC A/B‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ )‪ (!TEMP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫■ ‪ :Preset‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC A/B‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Mixolydn 5 ،Lydian 4 ،Dorian 3 ،Minor 2 ،Major 1‬ﻣﻴﻜﺴﻮﻟﻴﺪﻥ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) M.Minor 8 ،Locrian 7 ،Phrygian 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) H.Minor 9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪) H.M. 5th 10 ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Altered 11‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ(‪) WholeTon 12 ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‪) Diminish 13 ،‬ﺗﻀﺎﺋﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Pentaton 14‬ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺎﺳﻲ(‪) M.Penta 15 ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪،Blues 16 ،‬‬
‫‪) Kick 17‬ﻃﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ(‪،Toms 20 ،Hi-hat 19 ،Snare 18 ،‬‬
‫‪Velocity 22 ،Cymbal 21‬‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) H.Minor 3 ،Minor 2 ،Diatonic 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪Velocity 4 ،‬‬
‫‪AR-59‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:47 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 59‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫■ ‪ :Note Shift‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )ﻣﻦ ‪ –24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+24‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC A/B‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪PATTERN‬‬
‫‪(–, +) :‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪WRITE‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-71‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ (–, +) :‬‬
‫‪  (–, +) :‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ (–, +) :‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CHAIN‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،LOOP‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ END‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪DELETE‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪INSERT‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪CHAIN‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪START/STOP‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪WRITE‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-71‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫‪AR-60‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:48 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 60‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ CHAIN‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.CHAIN‬‬
‫)‪ (+‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ SMF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ CHAIN‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.CHAIN‬‬
‫)‪ (+‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪(U, q, w, I‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “SMF Save‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ START/STOP‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﺒﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-60‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ CHAIN‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪(U, q, w, I‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.CHAIN‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Initialize‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-75‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-73‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ YES‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”!‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-61‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:49 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 61‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫‪7 8‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺎ )ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ”ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ“( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 100‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-64‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PERFORM‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. EDIT‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻭﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪/(q‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪(w‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﺒﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.AR-64‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ EDIT‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ WRITE‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-73‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-79‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪K1‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) K4‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-64‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )‪ (U‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-62‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:50 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 62‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PERFORM‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ( ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “PrfrmFilter >Ent‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪PrfrmFilter >Ent‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Step Seq‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Arpeggio‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Phrase‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Tempo‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ Tempo‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Sys Rev‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Sys Cho‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Master EQ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪ .(Master EQ‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪AR-63‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:50 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 63‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪Zone Parame >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(4‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-62‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ . EDIT‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Zone‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-68‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Tone‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﻴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-16‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪) 4‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-16‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DSP‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-37‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪:1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪Solo Synth P00‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Various U29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪:4‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Piano P00‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪Various U29‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪) F3‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) C7‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪) C2‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) E3‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫‪KeyRangLow‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪4‬‬
‫‪E3 F3‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪KeyRangHi‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪Oct.Shift‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2‬‬
‫‪Transpose‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﺒﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+12‬‬
‫‪FineTune‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –99‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+99‬‬
‫‪BendRngDwn‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪24‬‬
‫‪BendRngUp‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪24‬‬
‫‪Rev Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Cho Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪DSP Line‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪ .DSP‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Knob1Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ .1‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪  K1‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Knob2Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ .2‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪  K2‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Knob3Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ .3‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪  K3‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Knob4Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ .4‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪  K4‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Bend Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪  BENDER‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Wheel Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪  MODULATION‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Pedal Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪  SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪AR-64‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:50 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 64‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Arp Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-40‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Phrase Enable‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-44‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Controller >Ent‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ‪ .1‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ . K1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ”‪ “CC67:Soft‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪  K1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ CC00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :CC97‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪*MIDI‬‬
‫‪ :RPN ،NRPN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ MIDI NRPN‬ﻭ ‪* *RPN‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ :Ch Pressure‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪*MIDI‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-40‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-45‬‬
‫‪) Master EQ >Low Gain - High Gain :EQ Low Gain - EQ High Gain‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-38‬‬
‫‪٢ ١‬‬
‫‪K1‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ (http://world.casio.com/) MIDI‬ﻭﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 63H :MSB‬ﻟـ ‪ 65H ،NRPN‬ﻟـ ‪) RPN‬ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫‪ 62H :LSB‬ﻟـ ‪ 64H ،NRPN‬ﻟـ ‪) RPN‬ﻣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ MSB‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .LSB‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪(LSB ،MSB :‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ K2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪K4‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ‪ .4‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ‪) K1‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ‪ ،(1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪ K2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.K4‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.K1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK‬‬
‫‪Pedal‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺨﻔﺾ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻨﻴﻮﺗﻮ )‪ :(Sostenut‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ )ﻳﻤﺴﻚ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )‪ :(SSEQ P/S‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )‪ :(Phrase P/S‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )‪ :(Phrase REC‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪. REC‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲﺀ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ )‪ :(Rotary S/F‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺒﻲ ‪ . SLOW/FAST‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Touch‬‬
‫‪TchOffVel‬‬
‫‪Sequencers >Ent‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ :(Off‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-49‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-44‬ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-40‬‬
‫‪Tempo‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪. TEMPO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪255‬‬
‫‪Step SEQ‬‬
‫‪Number‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-51‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Preset00‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪User99‬‬
‫‪Solo1 Ch‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪ ،14‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪) 1‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-54‬‬
‫‪14 ،1‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-55‬‬
‫‪Real ،Wait‬‬
‫‪Key Shift‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-51‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Pattern‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-49‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫‪Arp On/Off‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Arp Type‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-40‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Preset00‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪User99‬‬
‫‪ArpKeyRgLo‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪AR-65‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:51 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 65‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪ArpKeyRgHi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪Arp Hold‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-40‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Arp Synchro‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-40‬‬
‫‪S/S ،On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Key Play‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Phrase‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-44‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Preset00‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪User99‬‬
‫‪PhrKeyRgLo‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-45‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪PhrKeyRgHi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-45‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪G9‬‬
‫‪Effect >Ent‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-38‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫‪MIDI >Ent‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ .MIDI‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪) MIDI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-70‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪Ext Out Ch‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ MIDI‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ext In Ch‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،Off‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪Gen Out‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺐ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺖ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪MIDI Out‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ .MIDI‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ MIDI‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪. MIDI OUT/THRU‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪USB Out‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ .USB‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ MIDI‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪. USB‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪AR-66‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:52 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 66‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯*‬
‫ﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،16‬ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-18‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ“‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MIXER‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫)‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-68‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MIXER‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ MASTER‬ﻭﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (16‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MIXER‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪ ،All‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫• ”‪ “All‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪01‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .16‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ ،“All‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PART‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “01‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-68‬‬
‫‪Master‬‬
‫• ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ ،“Master‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫)–( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “01‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-68‬‬
‫‪Ext‬‬
‫• ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ ،“Ext‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪  PART‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–(‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “01‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪1‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،FUNC A/B ،KEY SHIFT‬ﻭ ‪1-8/9-16‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.MASTER‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪Master‬‬
‫‪Ext‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪08‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 08‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(16‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ )ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪AR-67‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:52 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 67‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻟﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ‪08‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 16‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Tone‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DSP‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-37‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪ :01‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ Solo Synth P00‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪Various U29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 02‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪:16‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Piano P00‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪Various U29‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Part‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪CoarseTune‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+12‬‬
‫‪FineTune‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –99‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+99‬‬
‫‪BendRange‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ( ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ‪. BENDER‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+24‬‬
‫‪DSP Line‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪) DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-37‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Rev Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-37‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Cho Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-37‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫■ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Part‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫‪DSP Line‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ”ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ‪) “16‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-68‬‬
‫‪Rev Send‬‬
‫‪Cho Send‬‬
‫‪N.Thresh‬‬
‫ﻋﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪N.Release‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Auto Level‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮ￯ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،Off‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪3‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫‪AR-68‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:53 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 68‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-10‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 0.1‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 415.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 465.9‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪M.Coarse‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪0‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+24‬‬
‫‪Local Ctrl‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻼﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Start Up‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Perfm‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫‪ :Tone‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ :S.Seq‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪Contrast‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪17‬‬
‫‪Auto Power‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪Tuning‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “General >Ent‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ‪MIDI‬؟‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫)‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ‪ MIDI‬ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻶﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻴﻨﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ “MIDI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ URL‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-8‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-79‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-67‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ MIDI IN‬ﻭ ‪ ،MIDI OUT‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-64‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ‪ MIDI 1‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ )‪.(GM‬‬
‫‪AR-69‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:25:54 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 69‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “MIDI >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪Sync Mode‬‬
‫)‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪Device ID‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪Basic Ch‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪ .(basic channel‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﻟـ ”‪،“Perform NRPN‬‬
‫”‪ ،“S.Seq NRPN‬ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪MIDIOutSel‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.(MIDI OUT select) MIDI OUT‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪*.MIDI OUT‬‬
‫‪ :(Keyboard) KEY‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(MIDI IN) MIDI‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫‪(MIDI THRU)  MIDI IN‬‬
‫‪ :(USB IN) USB‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ USB‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪USBOutSel‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ .(USB out select) USB‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪*.USB‬‬
‫‪) KEY‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‪ :‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(MIDI IN) MIDI‬ﺃﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ MIDI IN‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪MIDI In‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) MIDI IN‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪.(MIDI IN‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪  MIDI IN‬ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪USB In‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) USB IN‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪.(USB IN‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪  USB‬ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )‪ .(sync mode‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪*.‬‬
‫‪ :Off‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫‪) Mast‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Slav‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻖ(‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺃﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Perform NRPN‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ‪NRPN‬‬
‫)‪.(performance NRPN change‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-63‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ MIDI NRPN‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫‪S.Seq NRPN‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ NRPN‬ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫)‪.(step Sequencer NRPN Change‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-51‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ MIDI NRPN‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .(device ID) ID‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ID‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺃﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪.MIDI‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،16‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “All‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.ID‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،ID‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪Phrase NRPN‬‬
‫‪Arp NRPN‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ NRPN‬ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ .(phrase NRPN change‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-44‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ MIDI NRPN‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ NRPN‬ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ .(arpeggio NRPN change‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-40‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ MIDI NRPN‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪On ،Off‬‬
‫* ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺭﺟﻌﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪SETTING‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ”‪“MIDI >Ent‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-66‬‬
‫‪AR-70‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:00 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 70‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(AR-75‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Clear USER‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪NO‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫”‪ “Initialize >Ent‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(ENTER) ‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.INITIALIZE‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪Parameter >Ent‬‬
‫‪All >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-69‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ YES‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”!‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-71‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:01 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 71‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪) SMF‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  SETTING‬ﻭ ‪ WRITE‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪ SMF‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺤﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪STEP‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪) d‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ‪ STEP + :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪Demo >Ent‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ )‪ .(Demo‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪SMF >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪.(Standard MIDI File) SMF‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪ SMF‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻘﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ‪ SMF‬ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪0‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.(MID) MIDI 1‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪MUSICDAT‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-77‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Audio >Ent‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-80‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Y‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫‪) k‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ START/STOP‬‬
‫‪ CHAIN‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ PART‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ WRITE‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ SETTING‬ﻭ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-72‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:01 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 72‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ (MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‪ SDHC :‬ﺃﻭ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ 32 :‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDHC‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-62‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZPF‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-33‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZTN‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-32‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫)‪(ZDO‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-30‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZLT‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-22‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZSY‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-34‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZDR‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-39‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(DS7‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-51‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZSS‬‬
‫ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-61‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪،ZSC‬‬
‫‪) MID‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻘﻂ((‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-44‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZPH‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-41‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZAR‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )‪(ZAL‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪(ZST‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-75‬ﻭ ”ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-77‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-76‬ﻭ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-77‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-78‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ SMF‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ 0‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪(MID) MIDI 1‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-79‬‬
‫‪AR-73‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:02 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 73‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﻛﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻣﺘﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪POWER‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-82‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “No Card‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-78‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺣﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬ ﹰﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ )‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﺐ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺝ ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺟﺬﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-74‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:03 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 74‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻻﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﺮﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ”ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“CARD UTIL‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Format‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪PCM‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. TONE‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. DRAWBAR ORGAN‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﺲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ( ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. TONE‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. HEX LAYER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. TONE‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. SOLO SYNTH‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪PCM‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. TONE‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  VARIOUS‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  MIXER‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ EFFECT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “DSP Select‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪. ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”‪ “Ent‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. STEP SEQ‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  CHAIN‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ CHAIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  KEY PLAY‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ PHRASE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  ARPEGGIO‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ARPEGGIO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “All data‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪  YES‬ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ NO‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”!‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. PERFORM‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. TONE‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ‪ PIANO‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ VARIOUS‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪.“Sure‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪AR-75‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:03 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 75‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “SettingData‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪. ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-12‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫'‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “Card Save‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Save‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪) .‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪(.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫_‬
‫`‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫&‬
‫~‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪5 6‬‬
‫‪F G‬‬
‫‪P Q‬‬
‫‪Z S‬‬
‫@ }‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫{‬
‫‪1 2 3‬‬
‫‪B C D‬‬
‫‪L M N‬‬
‫‪V W X‬‬
‫^ ‪) -‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪NO‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. ENTER‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“CARD UTIL‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “ALL Data‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-76‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:04 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 76‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Save‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “Card Load‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Load‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-75‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-75‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪.MUSICDAT‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(AR-75‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪NO‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪SETTING‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“CARD UTIL‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “All Data‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-77‬‬
‫‪AR-77‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:05 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 77‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.CARD UTIL‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Delete‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (w‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “CardUtility‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.CARD UTIL‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (U, q, w, I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Rename‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ YES‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ )‪ (U‬ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻦ )‪ (I‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–( ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪NO‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪) “Please Wait‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫”!‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪NO‬‬
‫‪YES‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ YES‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪) “Please Wait‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫”!‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-72‬‬
‫‪AR-78‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:05 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 78‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A-B‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.MIDI‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮﻳﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ SP2) Windows® XP‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ(‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫®‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫‪Windows® 7‬‬
‫‪ 10.5.8 ،10.4.11 ،10.3.9) Mac OS® X‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪ 10.6.8 ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 10.7.1‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺪﺙ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪ Windows XP :١‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ Windows XP‬ﺇﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ 32‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫*‪ 32) Windows Vista :٢‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫*‪ 32) Windows 7 :٣‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ 64 ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻚ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪A‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.MIDI‬‬
‫‪) : CASIO USB-MIDI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ‪ ،Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﻭ‬
‫‪(Mac OS X‬‬
‫”ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ “USB‬ﺃﻭ ‪) :‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫”‪ USB‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ“‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،MIDI‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ MIDI‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪) “MIDI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-70‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪AR-79‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:06 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 79‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻮﻻﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ CASIO WORLDWIDE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪URL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-80‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:06 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 80‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-75‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ‪.SDXC‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺕ ‪ SDXC‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SDHC‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 32‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Card Full‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Card R/W‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻊ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-78‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪No Card‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪No Data‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪No File‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪) MUSICDAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-77‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪.MUSICDAT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-75‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ‪ SMF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪Not SMF0/1‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ SMF‬ﺫﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪Read Only‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‪-‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪Size Over‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻤﻰ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SMF‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪SMF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wrong Data‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬
‫‪Memory Full‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ 8 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ‪ 100‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-81‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:07 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 81‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪File Name‬‬
‫‪Invalid Tone‬‬
‫‪Battery Low‬‬
‫!‪Write Error‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻧﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻜﻴﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﻏﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪.(ZONE1) PART1‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻜﻴﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫‪.(ZONE1) PART1‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺃﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺘﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪POWER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻓﺠﺄﺀﺓ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﻲﺀ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻓﺠﺄﺀﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺤﺎﻗﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ POWER‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺋﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﻴﺌ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﹰﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-8‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪) 64‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 32‬ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-65‬‬
‫‪AR-82‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:07 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 82‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻵﺕ ﺍﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺠﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-36‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-37‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺃ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-79‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮ￯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-83‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:08 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 83‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻏﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪PCM‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ‪PCM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪XW-P1‬‬
‫‪ 61‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ–ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 64‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 32‬ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ 620‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ 310 ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ 100 ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ 50 ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ 50 ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 400‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ 100 ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ 10 ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ 100 ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 53‬ﻧﻮﻉ )‪ 46‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ 7 ،‬ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﺳﻮﻟﻮ(‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺰﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ 100 ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،8 :‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،1 :‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪4 :‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ±1‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +12‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫‪ ±3‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ =A4‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 415.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 440.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 465.9‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪100 :‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪100 :‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺮﺱ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ GM Level 1 ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 32 ،SDHC‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ‪ ،SMF‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪AR-84‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:08 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 84‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺭﺝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪MIDI IN/OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪L/MONO ،Line Out R‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪B‬‬
‫‪OUT ،IN‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻨﻴﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ × ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 2.3 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 1.7 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪MAX (RMS‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ 9 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ 200 :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ 9 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ 200 :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ 3 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ 10 :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪DC‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻚ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺑﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪D-‬‬
‫‪ 35‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ CASIO CP-16‬ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪AD-E95100L‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ .AC‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ = ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ 5.4‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ 12.4 × 38.4 × 94.8‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﻖ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-85‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:08 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 85‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،TV‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻟﻢ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﺭﺗﺸﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺎﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮ￯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪.AC‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻀﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ %10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪RH %90‬‬
‫ﻗﻀﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪& :‬‬
‫■ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ”ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ“ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﺥ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺩﺍﺏ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ﺣﺬﺭ ﹰﺍ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺗﺨﺎﺫﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-86‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:08 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 86‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬DSP ‫■ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬DSP ‫ ﻧﻮﻉ‬.‫ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬46 ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬15 ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬،‫ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬14 ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬01 ‫• ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
.‫ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﻳﻦ‬DSP ‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫“ ﻳﺘﺼﻼﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ‬Wah-Compressor” ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬15 ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬،‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﻢ‬،‫ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﻳﻦ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﻴﻦ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﻦ‬DSP ‫• ﺃﺳﻢ‬
.‫“ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬Compressor” ‫“ ﻭ‬Wah” ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
DSP ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
CmpCho
Compressor-Chorus
CmpFln
Compressor-Flanger
CmpRef Compressor-Reflection
CmpTrm
Compressor-Tremolo
CmpPan Compressor-AutoPan
DstWah
Distortion-Wah
DstCmp Distortion-Compressor
DstCho
Distortion-Chorus
DstFln
Distortion-Flanger
DstRef
Distortion-Reflection
DstTrm
Distortion-Tremolo
DstPan
Distortion-AutoPan
ChoRef
Chorus-Reflection
ChoPan
Chorus-AutoPan
FlnRef
Flanger-Reflection
FlnPan
Flanger-AutoPan
RefDst
Reflection-Distortion
RefCho
Reflection-Chorus
RefPan
Reflection-AutoPan
TrmDst
Tremolo-Distortion
TrmCho
Tremolo-Chorus
TrmFln
Tremolo-Flanger
TrmRef
Tremolo-Reflection
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
DSP ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
Wah
Wah
Comp
Compressor
Dist
Distortion
Enhance
Enhancer
AutoPan
AutoPan
Tremolo
Tremolo
Phaser
Phaser
Flanger
Flanger
Chorus
Chorus
Delay
Delay
Reflect
Reflection
Rotary
Rotary
RingMod
RingModulator
Lo-Fi
Lo-Fi
WahCmp
Wah-Compressor
WahDst
Wah-Distortion
WahCho
Wah-Chorus
WahFln
Wah-Flanger
WahRef
Wah-Reflection
WahTrm
Wah-Tremolo
WahPan
Wah-AutoPan
CmpWah
Compressor-Wah
CmpDst Compressor-Distortion
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
.‫ ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬،DSP ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
:‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ‬
(AR-88 ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬DSP ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
:‫ ﻫﺬﺍ‬DSP ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
(14 ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬01 ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
(AR-90 ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬DSP ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
(46 ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬15 ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬DSP ‫■ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
Chorus
Delay
RingMod
DSP ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
Chorus
Delay
Ring Modulator
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
04
05
06
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
Bypass
AutoPan
Dist
Flanger
DSP ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
Bypass
Auto Pan
Distortion
Flanger
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
01
02
03
.(AR-90 ‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬،DSP ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
AR-87
XWP1_ar.indb 87
12/20/2011 1:26:09 PM
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫• )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ (A‬ﻭ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ (B‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ( ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Enhancer :04‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ 8/16‬ﻭ ‪MASTER‬‬
‫‪Wah :01‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ “wah‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Resonance : ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Manual : ٢‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪.wah‬‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ٣‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٤‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ٥‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪Compressor :02‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Attack : ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺚ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺆﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Release : ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ )ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Level : ٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Threshold : ٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻞ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪Distortion :03‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Gain : ١‬ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Level : ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪-‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Low Frequency : ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Low Phase : ٢‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯–ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪) High Frequency : ٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) High Phase : ٤‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ –ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Auto Pan :05‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) Manual : ٤‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (63‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ –64‬ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ 0 ،‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ 63‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tremolo :06‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪Phaser :07‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ LFO‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺧﻠﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Resonance : ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ٢‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٣‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ٤‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪AR-88‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:10 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 88‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪Flanger :08‬‬
‫‪Reflection :11‬‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻰ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ LFO‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) Feedback : ٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻹﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Type : ١‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ( )‪) (8 ،7 ،6 ،5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Feedback : ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Chorus :09‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺗﺴﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) Feedback : ٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) Type : ٥‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ( )ﺇﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Delay :10‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺧﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻐﺬﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺗﺴﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Delay Time : ١‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Feedback : ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Ratio Lch : ٣‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Ratio Rch : ٤‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Wet Level : ٥‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺐ( )‪) (5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1 ،0‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Type : ٦‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ( )‪(2 ،1‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ١‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ٢‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪.L/R‬‬
‫‪Rotary :12‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Overdrive Gain : ١‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( )‪) (3 ،2 ،1 ،0‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Overdrive Level : ٢‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Speed : ٣‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( )ﺑﻄﺊ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Brake : ٤‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻣﻠﺔ( )ﻳﺪﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Fall Accelerator : ٥‬ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Rise Accelerator : ٦‬ﺃﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Slow Rate : ٧‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲﺀ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Fast Rate : ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ring Modulator :13‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺮﺏ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) OSC Frequency : ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) (OSC‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ٢‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٣‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪) Type : ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ( )‪(3 ،2 ،1‬‬
‫‪ : ١‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ٢‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ٣‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 2‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Tempo Sync : ٧‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪،1/2 ،3/8 ،1/3 ،1/4 ،Off :‬‬
‫‪(2 ،3/2 ،4/3 ،1 ،3/4 ،2/3‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Off‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-89‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:10 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 89‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪Lo-Fi :14‬‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪Lo-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺥ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Wow and Flutter Rate : ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ(‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Wow and Flutter Depth : ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ(‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Noise1 Level : ٣‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ( )‪) (5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1 ،0‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪) Noise2 Level : ٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪) (5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1 ،0) (2‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪) Noise2 Density : ٥‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪(5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1 ،0) (2‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻤﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪) Bit : ٦‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( )‪(3 ،2 ،1 ،0‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻮﻫﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪Distortion-Wah :29‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ “Distortion” Distortion-Wah‬ﻭ ”‪“Wah‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ“ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫‪Wah‬‬
‫‪LFO Waveform‬‬
‫‪LFO Rate‬‬
‫‪(Param) LFO Depth‬‬
‫‪Distortion‬‬
‫‪(Param) Gain‬‬
‫‪Level‬‬
‫‪Chorus‬‬
‫‪LFO Waveform‬‬
‫‪(Param) LFO Rate‬‬
‫‪LFO Depth‬‬
‫‪Flanger‬‬
‫‪LFO Waveform‬‬
‫‪(Param) LFO Rate‬‬
‫‪LFO Depth‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ“ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ AR-88‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،AR-90‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ“ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ ”‪ ،“Distortion-Wah‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﻫﻮ‬
‫”‪ “Distortion‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ”‪ “Gain‬ﻭ‬
‫”‪ “Level‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪ “Gain‬ﻭ ”‪“Level‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “03 :Distortion‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-88‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،1‬ﻭﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ ”‪ “Distortion-Wah‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Gain :١‬‬
‫‪Level :٢‬‬
‫‪LFO Waveform :٣‬‬
‫‪LFO Rate :٤‬‬
‫‪LFO Depth :٥‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺔ )ﻋﺎﻣﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ 8/16‬ﻭ ‪ MASTER‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﺲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ( ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪8/16‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MASTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ‬
‫• )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ (A‬ﻭ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ (B‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻟﻮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ 8/16‬ﻭ ‪MASTER‬‬
‫)ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ(‪Bypass :‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫‪Auto Pan :01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ١‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ٢‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٣‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫‪) Manual : ٤‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(63‬‬
‫‪Distortion :02‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Gain : ١‬ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫‪) Level : ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫‪Reflection‬‬
‫‪(Param) Feedback‬‬
‫‪Flanger :03‬‬
‫‪Compressor‬‬
‫‪(Param) Threshold‬‬
‫‪Level‬‬
‫‪Auto Pan‬‬
‫‪LFO Waveform‬‬
‫‪LFO Rate‬‬
‫‪LFO Depth‬‬
‫‪(Param) Manual‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ١‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ٢‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٣‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫‪Tremolo‬‬
‫‪LFO Waveform‬‬
‫‪(Param) LFO Rate‬‬
‫‪LFO Depth‬‬
‫‪AR-90‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:11 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 90‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪Chorus :04‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) LFO Waveform : ١‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬
‫‪) LFO Rate : ٢‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫‪) LFO Depth : ٣‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) (LFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪Delay :05‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Delay Time : ١‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫‪) Feedback : ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫‪) Damp : ٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻤﻴﺪ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(3‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻤﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺪ￯‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ 3 .‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻤﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Wet Level : ٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪) (5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1 ،0 :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫‪) Tempo Sync : ٥‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪،1/2 ،3/8 ،1/3 ،1/4 ،Off :‬‬
‫‪(2 ،3/2 ،4/3 ،1 ،3/4 ،2/3‬‬
‫‪Ring Modulator :06‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Frequency : ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪) Dry Level : ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(127‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Wet Level : ٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺐ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (127‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-88‬‬
‫‪AR-91‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:26:11 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 91‬‬
Model: XW-P1
1 - 16
1 - 16
Transmitted
1 - 16
1 - 16
Recognized
MIDI Implementation Chart
Default
Changed
Mode 3
X
Function
Basic
Channel
Mode 3
X
Version : 1.0
Remarks
0 - 127
0 - 127 *1
Default
Messages
Altered
0 - 127
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
X 9nH v = 0, 8nH v =**
True voice
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
X 9nH v = 0
X
O
Mode
Note
Number
Pitch Bender
Control
Change
t
t
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento Time
Data entry LSB, MSB
Volume
Pan
Expression
‫ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ‬:**
X
X
O
Hold 1
Portamento On/Off
Note ON
Note OFF
O
O
O
O *2
O *2
O
O
O
O *2
O
O *2
S
Velocity
O
O
O *2
O *2
O
O
X
O *2
O *3
O *2
O
Key’s
Ch’s
0
1
5
6, 38
7
10
11
16 - 19
64
65
O *3
After
Touch
66
12/20/2011 1:26:12 PM
XWP1_ar.indb 92
66
67
70 - 90
91
93
98, 99
100, 101
O *3
O *3
O *2
O
O
O *2
O *2
O
O
O *2
O
O
O *2
O *2
O *2
O
0 - 127
O *2
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
:True #
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
O
O
Program
Change
System
Common
: Clock
: Commands
System Exclusive
System
Real Time
O
O
O
O
O
X
Aux
X
O
X
O
X
X
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
Sostenuto
Soft pedal
Reverb send
Chorus send
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
O : Yes
X : No
.‫ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬:*1
.http://world.casio.com/ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬MIDI ‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬،‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬،PRN ،NRPN ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬:*2
.‫ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬:*3
: All sound off
: Reset all controller
: Local ON/OFF
: All notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
Messages
Remarks
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
12/20/2011 1:28:14 PM
XWP1_ar.indb 2
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪XW-P1‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪MA1112-A Printed in China‬‬
‫‪XWP1-AR-1A‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪XWP1-AR-1A‬‬
‫‪12/20/2011 1:28:14 PM‬‬
‫‪XWP1_ar.indb 1‬‬
Download PDF

advertising